manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsElectronic KeyboardAT-3

AT3/AT5-AR-1B

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﻞﺒﻘﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻊﺟﺮﻤﻛ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻴﻤﺟ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻆﻓﺎﺣ ﻚﻠﻀﻓ ﻦﻣ

ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﺇ

ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﺇ” ﻞﺼﻔﻨﻤﻟﺍ ءﺰﺠﻟﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺗ ،ﺢﻴﺗﺎﻔﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﺣﻮﻟ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺇ ﺔﻟﻭﺎﺤﻣ ﻞﺒﻗ

.“ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ

.ﺎﻴﻧﺎﻤﻟﺃ ﻰﻓ ﺔﻴﺌﻴﺒﻟﺍ ﺔﻳﺎﻤﺤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺘﻟﺍ ﻥﻮﻧﺎﻗ ﻰﻟﺇ ﺮﻴﺸﺗ ﺔﻳﺮﺋﺍﺪﻟﺍ ﺔﻣﻼﻌﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ

MA1011-B Printed in China

AT3/AT5-AR-1B

Summary of content (162 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1011-B Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪AT3/AT5-AR-1B‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.
PAGE 2
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﺎً ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-4 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪AR-26 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪AR-6 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪AR-7 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪AR-7 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪AR-7 ........................ “Please Wait‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪AR-8 .......................................
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-97 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-97 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-98 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻬﻞ( ‪AR-107 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ( ‪AR-108 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء( ‪AR-111 .........
PAGE 5
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ .AT-3/AT-5 ‫ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻆ ”ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬،‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ .‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬$ ‫ ﻭ‬# ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ # EDIT ،SONG SEQUENCER ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ‬R-13 (FUNCTION) ‫ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬: # .
PAGE 7
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4 5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-9 (CARD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ JEITA) AC‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪AD-A12150LW :‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D-‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻛﺴﻴﺮﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ ،CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬ ‫)‪ (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪L-4‬‬ ‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬ ‫‪L-1‬‬ ‫‪L-2‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-19‬‬ ‫‪R-20‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ )‪ L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ MIN‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-11‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-1 (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-4‬‬ ‫)‪ ،([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ .TONE ١٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪ 001‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-19‬‬ ‫‪R-20‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪ (UPPER 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪ (LOWER‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ @ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-19 (SPLIT‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.(UPPER 1‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻣﻌﺎً‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-10 (METRONOME‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ TEMPO‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪TEMPO‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-12 (TAP‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ (S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻨﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ ﻳﺨﻔﻀﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.ARPEGGIATOR‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-8‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻼﻟﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ( ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ‪ ١٢‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻢ )ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) 01‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ Equal :01‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫)ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،D-5 (STORE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) SCALE MEMORY‬ﻣﻦ ‪ D-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (D-4‬ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-4‬‬ ‫‪L-4 - L-9‬‬ ‫‪L-11‬‬ ‫‪L-12‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫‪R-18‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺇﻳﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻫﺐ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫■ ‪CASIO Chord‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-17‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.AT-5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ L-13‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.١٢‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬ ‫)‪.(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪.HARMONIZE‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪.T-8 (MIC IN‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ .“Chorus/DSP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DSP‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ،(DSP‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻼﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“DSP Disable‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“on‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus/DSP‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“DSP‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬ ‫)‪ (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-155‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻢ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪.DSP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ .DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-152‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪DSP RevSend‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ‪(DSP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ‪ DSP -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺰء‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) “Part‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Sol‬ﺳﻮﻟﻮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-43‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-7 (MIXER‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪R-13‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫”‪.“Initialize‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MASTER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MASTER‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪Volume‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MIC/INST‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MIC/INST‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭ )‪.T-8 (MIC IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪Part‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬ ‫‪Volume‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪*(Mic/Inst‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.(oFF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪*on ،oFF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *80‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪Pan‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬ ‫‪DSP Line‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻂ ‪(Mic/Inst DSP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.B16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪TONE‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 ([A] PIANO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪R-12‬‬ ‫)‪ ([L] USER TONES‬ﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L:100‬‬ ‫‪Part‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-8‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻴﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ A:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (K:128‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺟﺮﺱ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎً )ﺃﻗﻮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﺱ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻇﻼﻣﺎً )ﺃﻧﻌﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ L:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ L:100‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-12‬‬ ‫)‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-17‬‬ ‫)‪.(MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*(‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪AttackTime‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪.“DSP Type‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪DSP RevSend‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ‪(DSP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ‪.DSP -‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬ ‫‪Mod Setting‬‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ DSP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.S-2 (MODULATION‬‬ ‫‪DSP ،*Vib‬‬ ‫‪Mod Depth‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪L-4 - L-9‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-4 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-18‬‬ ‫)‪ (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪L-4‬‬ ‫)‪ ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬ ‫ﻛﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ F:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ F:050‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-9‬‬ ‫)‪ .([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-49‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ”‪ “Store‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ”‪) “Timing‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-53‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Half‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ‪3/4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 3/4‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪.6/8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪ “Half‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”‪ “3/4‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ 3/4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 4/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-49‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪R-1 (5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫)‪R-2 (1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫)‪R-3 (2‬‬ ‫‪ ٢/١‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪R-7 (6‬‬ ‫‪ ٤/١‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪R-8 (7‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-8 (7‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬ ‫)‪(Insert Measure‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪L-1‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-11 C-13 C-15 C-17‬‬ ‫‪C-10 C-12 C-14 C-16‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬ ‫‪C-5 C-6 C-7‬‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-19‬‬ ‫‪R-20‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫‪C-11‬‬ ‫‪C-14‬‬ ‫‪C-10 C-12 C-13‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ﻭ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩﺗﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ EASY REC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (e‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-63‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬ ‫■ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫– ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A07‬ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B16‬ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :A16‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ :DSP‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬ ‫
PAGE 68
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٧‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺎﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“RecType‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪.(16‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻷﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “RecType‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “REPL‬ﺃﻭ ”‪.“OVDB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪RecType‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬ ‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫”‪.“ClearTrack‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،(C-6 (RECORD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ )ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬ ‫)‪ .((RECORD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻭﻙ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-74‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ* ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬ ‫)‪.(START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ”‪.“PanelRecord‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬ ‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-14 (NO‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-13 (REPEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫”‪.“Clear‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“To‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Clear Song‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “DeleteMeas.‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 07‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-65‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪،A07‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪.(16‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫• ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-80‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-80‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪“Copy‬‬ ‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Copy Track‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Copy‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬ ‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻮﺭﺍُ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‪” .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ“ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫■ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﻭ ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬ ‫• ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪TnU1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪UPPER 1‬‬ ‫]‪[Tone_U1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪TnU2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪UPPER 2‬‬ ‫]‪[Tone_U2‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪TnLo‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪LOWER‬‬ ‫]‪[Tone_Lo‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪TnHm‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫]‪[Tone_Hm‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬ ‫‪ROOT
PAGE 87
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬ ‫‪HARM‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪PART‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫]‪[AcmpVol‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪127 - 000‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫]‪[AcmpScl‬‬ ‫‪VALU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬ ‫‪oFF ،on‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪RSnd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫]‪[RevSend‬‬ ‫‪CSnd‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭ
PAGE 88
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫)‪(View Select‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-82‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ”‪.“ViewSelect‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“View Select‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “Delete‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬ ‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻛﺤﺪﺙ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-12 (COPY‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Copy‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺃﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .AR-93‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫”‪ “GatetimeMod.‬ﺑﺪ ًﻻ ﻣﻦ ”‪.“VelocityMod.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ AR-82‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Beat‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-94‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-11 (INSERT‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 (5‬ﺇﻟﻰ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-7 (6‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ R-10 (,‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-89‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-7‬‬ ‫‪C-4‬‬ ‫‪L-9‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫‪C-10‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫‪Fix Data‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪Recorded Data‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ(‬ ‫‪Empty‬‬ ‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫■ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ INTRO‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-13 (INTRO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬ ‫)‪ (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ ،INTRO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (INTRO‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ NORMAL‬ﻭ ‪ ،NORMAL FILL-IN‬ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬ ‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ‪ VARIATION‬ﻭ ‪VARIATION‬‬ ‫‪.FILL-IN‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )‪(Rec Menu‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬ ‫)‪.(RECORD‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫)‪) “(Rec Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-101‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬ ‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬ ‫)‪ .
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪S-2‬‬ ‫)‪ (MODULATION‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬ ‫)‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-115‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻬﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬ ‫)‪ (START/STOP‬ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ]‪ [RHYTHM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،EASY EDIT‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫”‪) “Bend‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Mod‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ( ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ “VALU‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء(‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-112‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ”‪) “PartPara‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫■ ‪) Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺟﺬﺭ ‪ ،C‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(*‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ C‬ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫■ ‪) BreakPoint‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ENDING‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍً ﻛﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “ElementEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“ElementEdit‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪C-9‬‬ ‫‪C-5‬‬ ‫‪C-3‬‬ ‫‪C-2‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-116‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪CD‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-118‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-118‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪UPPER 1،‬‬ ‫‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭ ‪ LOWER‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .
PAGE 123
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬ ‫■ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬ ‫)‪ (PLAY/STOP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-121‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ?‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-2 (AUDIO PLAY‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 005‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪R-15‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪R-18‬‬ ‫‪C-17‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-126‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 128
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪) ArpegSpeed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-21‬‬ ‫‪8 ،6 ،4S ،*4 ،3 ،2S ،2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫”‪ ،“4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫‪) KeyboardCh‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ”ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬ ‫‪) AccompVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪A09‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .(A16‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(A03‬‬ ‫‪000 - 115* - 127‬‬ ‫‪) SongVol.
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪) AutoPower‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-13‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ )‪ (*on‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ )‪ .(oFF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-4‬‬ ‫)‪ ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬ ‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “General‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪ “Initialize‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-13‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-9‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎّ ﻋﺰﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻘﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﻲء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲءﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫”‪.“CardFormat‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ )ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.١*“Xxxx Save‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ ،SMF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-17‬‬ ‫)‪ (y‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Seq SmfSave‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ”‪ ،“Xxxx Load‬ﻭ ”‪ ،“Seq Save‬ﻭ ”‪Seq‬‬ ‫‪ “SmfSave‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.R-17 (t, y‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ”‪ ٢*“USERNAME.xxx‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬ ‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪R-16‬‬ ‫‪R-14‬‬ ‫‪C-9‬‬ ‫‪L-9‬‬ ‫‪L-8‬‬ ‫‪R-17‬‬ ‫‪L-13‬‬ ‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬ ‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 0 SMF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MIDI‬‬ ‫)‪.(MID‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪ ،MP3 ،WAV‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-142‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ‪ .
PAGE 144
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫‪Format‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪Card Full‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Card R/W‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪No Card‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪Memory Full‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﺰء‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 146
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺍﺳﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪AT-3 / AT-5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٦١ :AT-3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٧٦ :AT-5‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ٦٤‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫‪٨٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ١٠٠‬ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪DSP‬‬ ‫‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟ
PAGE 149
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ‪ ،SMF‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪L/MONO ،Line Out R‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪Inst In‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪TYPE B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪء‪
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺃءﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬ ‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .(AR-34 ‫“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬DSP ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺳﻢ‬،DSP ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ“ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬.(AR-151 ‫“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ”ﻧﻮﻉ“ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬٤٦ ‫ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬DSP ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ .
PAGE 152
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬AR-35 ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ‬.‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬DSP ‫ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬DSP ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬DSP ‫ ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬DSP ‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬AR-44 ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ،‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ‬.DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬٤٦ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬١٥ ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬،DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬١٤ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬٠١ ‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ .
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪Wah :01‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ “wah‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Flanger :08‬‬ ‫‪Reflection :11‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻰ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ LFO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪: ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬ ‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ .‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪Lo-Fi :14‬‬ ‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Lo-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺥ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪ Fingered 3‬ﻭ ‪Full Range‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Fingered 1‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪AR-156‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪(A#)/Bb‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪(G#)/Ab‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‬MIDI ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ .
PAGE 159
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-61‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-129‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 160
Models: AT-3 / AT-5 1 - 16 1 - 16 Transmitted 1 - 16 1 - 16 Recognized MIDI Implementation Chart Default Changed Function Basic Channel 0 - 127 0 - 127 *1 Mode 3 X 0 - 127 O 9nH v = 1 - 127 X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =** Mode 3 X O 9nH v = 1 - 127 X 9nH v = 0 X O Default Messages Altered X X O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O *2 O O O O O O O O O O O O Filter cutoff Bank select Modulation Data entry LSB, MSB Volume Pan Expression DSP Parameter0 DSP Parameter1 DSP Parameter2 DSP Parameter3
PAGE 161
O 0 - 127 O O O O O O O O O O O *2 O *2 O 0 - 127 O *2 O O O O O O O O O O O *2 O *2 O *2 X X X 74 76 77 78 80 81 82 83 91 93 98, 99 100, 101 X X X X X :True # : Song Pos : Song Sel : Tune O O Program Change System Common : Clock : Commands O O X O O X Aux System Exclusive System Real Time X O X O X X Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Filter cutoff Vibrato rate Vibrato depth Vibrato delay DSP Parameter4 DSP Parameter5 DSP Parameter6 DSP Parameter7 Reverb send Chorus send NRP
PAGE 162
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MA1011-B Printed in China‬‬ ‫‪AT3/AT5-AR-1B‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.